Booking
The calendar overview below shows all available dates between Thursdays and Sundays in the coming mountainbike season in the Harz. Clicking on an appointment opens a booking dialog with further information. For clarity, appointments that are already fully booked or no longer available are partially hidden. For inquiries about other dates, individual offers or if you have any questions/problems, please use the page contact.
Season
Events
There are currently no events online. For event inquiries, please use the page contact.
Do you have any questions?
Email: info@fritzgeers.de
Phone: +49 5323 889 85 82
Chat:
WhatsApp Business
April 2025
03.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 13.03.2025
04.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 14.03.2025
05.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 15.03.2025
06.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 16.03.2025
10.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 20.03.2025
11.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 21.03.2025
12.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 22.03.2025
13.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 23.03.2025
17.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 27.03.2025
18.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 28.03.2025
19.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 29.03.2025
20.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 30.03.2025
24.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 03.04.2025
25.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 04.04.2025
26.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 05.04.2025
27.04.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 06.04.2025
May 2025
01.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 10.04.2025
02.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 11.04.2025
03.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 12.04.2025
04.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 13.04.2025
08.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 17.04.2025
09.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 18.04.2025
10.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 19.04.2025
11.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 20.04.2025
15.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 24.04.2025
16.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 25.04.2025
17.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 26.04.2025
18.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 27.04.2025
22.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 01.05.2025
23.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 02.05.2025
24.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 03.05.2025
25.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 04.05.2025
29.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 08.05.2025
30.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 09.05.2025
31.05.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 10.05.2025
June 2025
01.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 11.05.2025
05.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 15.05.2025
06.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 16.05.2025
07.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 17.05.2025
08.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 18.05.2025
12.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 22.05.2025
13.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 23.05.2025
14.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 24.05.2025
15.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 25.05.2025
19.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 29.05.2025
20.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 30.05.2025
21.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 31.05.2025
22.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 01.06.2025
26.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 05.06.2025
27.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 13.06.2025
28.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 07.06.2025
29.06.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 08.06.2025
July 2025
03.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 12.06.2025
04.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 13.06.2025
05.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 14.06.2025
06.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 15.06.2025
10.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 19.06.2025
11.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 20.06.2025
12.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 21.06.2025
13.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 22.06.2025
17.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 26.06.2025
18.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 27.06.2025
19.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 28.06.2025
20.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 29.06.2025
24.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 03.07.2025
25.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 04.07.2025
26.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 05.07.2025
27.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 06.07.2025
31.07.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 10.07.2025
August 2025
01.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 11.07.2025
02.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 12.07.2025
03.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 13.07.2025
07.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 17.07.2025
08.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 18.07.2025
09.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 19.07.2025
10.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 20.07.2025
14.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 24.07.2025
15.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 25.07.2025
16.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 26.07.2025
17.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 27.07.2025
21.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 31.07.2025
22.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 01.08.2025
23.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 02.08.2025
24.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 03.08.2025
28.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 07.08.2025
29.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 08.08.2025
30.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 09.08.2025
31.08.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 10.08.2025
September 2025
04.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 14.08.2025
05.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 15.08.2025
06.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 16.08.2025
07.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 17.08.2025
11.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 21.08.2025
12.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 22.08.2025
13.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 23.08.2025
14.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 24.08.2025
18.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 28.08.2025
19.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 29.08.2025
20.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 30.08.2025
21.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 31.08.2025
25.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 04.09.2025
26.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 05.09.2025
27.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 06.09.2025
28.09.2025Individual MTB guiding
You can book Fritz or local mountainbike guides from the Harz directly on this date and book additional dates. Please use the fields listed below. If you have any questions or would like an individual offer for a multi-day event or a multi-day stage tour, please use the page contact.
Choose this appointment:
Individualize appointment:
You can check here which options are available that day to adapt the appointment to your needs:
- Individual starting location
- Voucher
- Riding technique course
- E-Bike Tour
- Enduro-Tour
Further information:
Where does the tour/ course start?
Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. The exact starting location will be agreed with the MTB guide by email before the tour. You can specify that the tour starts directly at your accommodation or at a bike rental shop in Clausthal-Zellerfeld. If you would like the tour to start at an individual starting location in Hahnenklee, Altenau, Goslar orschulenberg, please book via appointment individualizations the appointment individualization “Other starting location”. The earlier you tell the MTB guide your desired starting location, the better he can work out the route directly from there.
How does the day look like?
Basically, you can help the MTB guide plan a good tour by providing a little information about yourself and your wishes in advance. Unless otherwise agreed, the tour starts at 10:00 a.m. on the booked date. First, the route leads over easier trails and paths so that the MTB guide can get an idea of you. Along the way, the MTB guide then adapts the route to your abilities, wishes and fitness so that the tour is neither too easy nor too difficult and contains many good paths. After about two thirds of the route, the tour includes the option of stopping at a restaurant (not included in the price). The tour lasts as long as fun, fitness and weather permit. Tours typically end between 3:00 p.m. and 5:00 p.m.
Number of participants
If you book an MTB guide/ appointments for individual MTB guiding, then the MTB guide will be reserved for you. Regardless of whether you organize a tour as an individual or for a group, no additional (external) participants will be added to the group and the price will not change. You will help the MTB guide to better adapt to you and the group by letting him know before the tour approximately how large the group will be. A good group size is 8 people per MTB guide (the maximum group size per MTB guide is 15 people).
Riding technique
Riding technique training on the tour is particularly possible for small groups: If necessary, the basics of mountainbike riding technique can be taught individually on the tour by the MTB guide and through practice suitable places in the terrain. Riding technique training can be incorporated into every tour. If you would like to book a riding technique course on this date, please book the appointment individualization via appointment individualizations “Riding technique course”. You can book this option at no extra charge. You can contact the MTB guide before the course to make your wishes and ideas clear.
Bike rental
It is possible to organize bike rental through partners. The MTB guide will help you prepare with recommendations and local contacts. If you have not booked an individual appointment for another starting location outside of Clausthal-Zellerfeld, then the bike rental at Outdoor Center Harz in Clausthal-Zellerfeld are recommended. It is possible to start the tour directly from here.
Level
The tour starts on easy paths and is planned individually in advance by the MTB guide when you submit requests and information about the group. The route can also be adjusted during the tour so that it is neither too easy nor too difficult. The difficulty of the paths, number of breaks, pace and demands are adapted to the abilities of the participants so that everyone can complete the tour with confidence. If necessary, basic riding techniques can be explained on the tour and incorporated into the tour where appropriate and expedient. The group can be divided in phases if the performance gap within the group varies greatly. If you are looking for a particularly technically demanding tour, please use the appointment individualization under appointment individualizations "Difficult enduro tour".
Bookable until: 07.09.2025
Individualize appointments for MTB guiding/ MTB courses
You can individualize appointments by booking various appointment individualizations.
Individual start location
Book this appointment individualization to start the tour directly at your accommodation near Clausthal-Zellerfeld. Possible starting locations are Hahnenklee, Altenau, Schulenberg or Goslar. Please let us know your desired starting point before the tour and the MTB guide will plan the route directly from here:
* Hahnenklee/ Schulenberg/ Altenau/ Goslar
E-Bike Tour
You should book this appointment individualization if you plan to ride the tour with e-mountainbikes so that the MTB guide can plan a route that is particularly suitable for e-mountainbikes. The MTB guide will guide the tour on an e-mountainbike:
* Only valid in conjunction with booking one/ several appointments. Before booking, please check whether the appointment individualization selected here is available on the date you have chosen.
Riding technique course
You can book this appointment individualization free of charge if you would like to book a riding technique course on this date (you can find further information here). During a riding technique course you will learn the basics of mountainbike riding technique step by step. The MTB guide looks at how you move on the mountainbike and gives you individual feedback on what you can improve. The aim is to improve your movement sequences on the mountainbike at specific points in the terrain. The aim of driving technique training is for you to gain confidence or learn new movement sequences:
Only valid in conjunction with booking one/ several appointments. Before booking, please check whether the appointment individualization selected here is available on the date you have chosen.
Difficult enduro tour
When you book this appointment individualization, the MTB guide will plan a route that includes technically demanding mountainbike trails. You should be confident in handling your mountainbike in high ledges (30 cm and higher), hairpin bends or on blocked, steep or rocky terrain. Despite conscientious briefings by the MTB guide and careful supervision, the terrain is dangerous and risky in places. Special equipment can reduce the risk of injury in the event of a fall, but it cannot compensate for unsafe handling of the mountainbike. Please only book this appointment individualization if you are sure that all participants in the group are up to the demands of such a tour:
Only valid in conjunction with booking one/ several appointments. Before booking, please check whether the appointment individualization selected here is available on the date you have chosen.
Bikepark Intensive Training
With this appointment individualization, you have the opportunity to learn basic mountainbike riding techniques, which are particularly needed in the bikepark, on the booked date (you can find further information on here): You learn how to ride high roots, steps, lines (e.g. in the root carpet), curves, berms, hairpin bends (with moving the rear wheel), Jumps, drops, heels and riding on steep slopes with the right riding technique. No protective equipment is included in the price. The MTB guide will contact you before the course to arrange suitable protective equipment for you or mountainbikes suitable for the bikepark for rental (not included in the price). The course takes place in the Bikepark Hahnenklee.
Only valid in conjunction with booking one/ several appointments. Before booking, please check whether the appointment individualization selected here is available on the date you have chosen.